Slide 1

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 2

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 3

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 4

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 5

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 6

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 7

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 8

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 9

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 10

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 11

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 12

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 13

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 14

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 15

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 16

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 17

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 18

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 19

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 20

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 21

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 22

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 23

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 24

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 25

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 26

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 27

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 28

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 29

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 30

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 31

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 32

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 33

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 34

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 35

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 36

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 37

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 38

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 39

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 40

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 41

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 42

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 43

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 44

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 45

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 46

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 47

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.


Slide 48

PreSort Letters Preparation
Business Letter Services

Introduction
The PreSort Letters service offers reduced prices to those customers who
can apply barcodes to their articles, sort them into a particular order, place
them into appropriately labelled trays, complete documentation prior to
posting at a designated postal outlet and comply with relevant mailing
conditions.
In this module
This module introduces you to Australia Post’s requirements for PreSort Letters preparation.

Learning outcomes
At the end of this module you will be able to:

• specify PreSort Letters article size, weight and type requirements
• identify the address layout and inscriptions on PreSort Letters articles
• identify the mandatory correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles

Domestic
Registered
Post offers
you: for the
Charity Mail
is an Australia
Post service
barcoded small
PreSort
Letters
• delivery
a uniqueofidentification
number
for every
article
income
exempt
All
• articles
proof offrom
posting
whentaxlodged
at charities.
the post office
mailings must meet the conditions of PreSort
counter
Letters to access Charity Mail rates. For more
• signature obtained on delivery
information see Charity Mail course
What is PreSort Letters?
• extra cover of up to $100 is included
Additional
services
for Domestic
letters:
PreSort Letters is an Australia Post service for the delivery of large volumes
of barcoded
articles
to addresses
within Australia. The minimum lodgement is 300 barcoded letters.
• delivery Confirmation – within Australia and
Companies can use PreSort Letters for almost any mailing requirement.International
• Person-to-Person Delivery
When a lodgement is prepared according to the conditions of the PreSort Letters service you can:
• additional Insurance up to $5,000
• lodge unbarcoded articles can with the barcoded articles

PreSort Letters at a glance

• access lower prices by sorting your articles
• access an Off Peak delivery service (taking up to an additional 3 days for delivery) at lower prices for non timecritical mail
• exercise the option to arrange your own transport to interconnect with Australia Post’s letter service network at
designated facilities
• use the Charity Mail and the Registered Post service in conjunction with the PreSort Letters service
• maximise the space available for creative artwork
• track and segment results of mailings due to information contained in the barcode
• access private box addresses
• access the Redirection service

PreSort Letters at a glance
More information
More detailed information is available in the PreSort
Letters Fact Sheet and PreSort Letters service
guide.
Prices for PreSort Letters can be found in the Post
Charges booklet and the Australia Post website
(auspost.com.au).
These guides are also available at any Australia Post
outlet.

PreSort Letters preparation
Preparation overview
To qualify for PreSort Letter prices, you need to meet the following Australia Post’s bulk mail
preparation requirements.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Introduction
PreSort letters can be either in envelopes, or as postcards and they can also be plastic wrapped.
To ensure PreSort Letters articles can be delivered correctly, you need to follow Australia Post’s bulk mail
requirements regarding the size, weight and article type.
The requirements for PreSort Letters articles include:
•
•
•
•
•

Size, weight and type
colour
window panel envelopes
plastic wrapping
flexibility

Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Size and weight
The size categories eligible for the PreSort Letters service are Small, Small Plus, Medium and Large.
All articles in a lodgement must be within the same size and weight category.
† Oblong: deviating from
a square by being
elongated in one
direction. It is preferred
that
the length
at least
A square
is an is
equilateral
1.2
times the width.
rectangle
Articles with a length less
than 1.2 times the width
may be accepted subject
to satisfactory test
results.

‘Reflectance’ is the degree to which
light reflects from a surface. Barcode
reader devices are sensitive to the
reflectance of the following:
• the printed barcode;
Size, weight and type requirements
• the space around the barcode; and,
• the window material through which
Article Shape type and colour
barcodes are scanned, when a
Square articles are permitted in the Medium and Large size categories, but are window
not permitted
in the Small
and Small Plus
face envelope
is used
size categories.

PreSort Letters preparation

PreSort Letters articles can be either envelopes or postcards. Plastic-wrapped articles are also accepted (conditions
apply).

Paper Stock
Paper stock is an important consideration as it can affect the ability of high speed letter sorting equipment to process
articles without damage. Australia Post recommends that envelopes and cards comply with Australian Standards for the
production of envelopes, Spec 4611 – 1999 (available at: http://infostore.saiglobal.com/store/). For details refer to your
paper supplier or envelope manufacturer or visit www.auspost.com.au/bulkmail to access the fact sheet: Paper stock for
bulk mail
There are no restrictions on the article colour for envelopes, postcards or plastic wrapped articles and/or flysheets
provided the background against which the barcode is printed meets the reflectance requirements contained at Barcoding
Print Specifications - see Advanced: Barcoding module

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Window faced envelopes
One of the main requirements of panel envelopes is that they have good, clear panels.
However, even very clear panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent. Refer to section 9 of
the Post Guide – Letters and Electronic Mail within Australia if required. This can be downloaded from the Australia Post
website (www.auspost.com.au).
The address area visible through the window panel must meet reflectance requirements.
Open window panels are not permitted.
The recommended minimum size for window panels is:
• 30mm high x 80mm wide, for Small and Small Plus size articles (up to C5)
• 45mm high x 95mm wide, for Medium and Large size articles.

The entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through
the window panel, when the article is presented for lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping
Plastic wrapping of articles can provide an alternative to envelopes. If desired, artwork and delivery address details
can be printed on a sheet of paper called a flysheet, which is visible through the plastic wrapping.
Where the address or address label is shown under a transparent wrapping, the area of the wrapper overlapping the
address must have a contrast ratio that does not exceed 25% when measured by a suitable photometric method.
Even very clear plastic wrappers or window panels can cause sorting difficulties if they reflect light to any great extent.
The following table shows the category of articles that are eligible for PreSort prices when wrapped in plastic.
Category
Small Letters
Small Plus Letters
Medium Letters
Large Letters

Eligibility of Plastic Wrapping
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible – Provided they are in Direct Trays
Eligible
Eligible

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Plastic wrapping requirements:
 Plastic wrapped PreSort Letters articles are measured on the ‘total plastic size,’ not the size of the contents
The sealing seam (weld) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
The hem (overlapping plastic area) must not intersect the address block or barcode either horizontally or vertically
 The maximum overhang (excess plastic wrap) is not to exceed:
• 10mm for all Small or Small Plus articles
• 35mm for Medium or Large articles up to 10mm thick
• 60mm for Medium or Large articles over 10mm thick







PreSort Letters preparation
Size, weight and type requirements
Flexibility of Small and Small Plus letters
Small and Small Plus articles must be reasonably flexible to ensure that they can be processed through high speed
letter sorting equipment.
Small and Small Plus articles that are too rigid or stiff are ineligible for the service (but may be accepted as Medium
articles). Some examples of prohibited enclosures includes pencils, pens and items enclosed in a hard case.

PreSort Letters preparation
Size, Weight and Type Requirements
Summary
Size, weight and type requirements for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•
•

Size and weight
Colour
Window Panel envelopes
Plastic Wrapping
Flexibility

Further information regarding Plastic wrap specifications can be located in the PreSort Letters service guide, the
Advanced Module: Plastic Wrapping and the Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Introduction
PreSort Letters articles need to be barcoded.
To qualify for PreSort Letters prices, you need to pay particular attention to addressing.
Australia Post has mandatory address requirements for PreSort Letters, including:
• Article layout and zones
• Delivery address
• Address and barcode location
• Barcoding
Each requirement is covered on the following pages.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article Layout and zones
PreSort Letters articles are made up of three printing zones.
You need to ensure sufficient space in your design to clearly display the address details or affix a Return to
Sender sticker.
The following items are mandatory
inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles:
• Postage meter impression or Postage Paid
imprint
• Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
• Return address
• Delivery address

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Zone
The postage zone contains a postage paid imprint or a postage meter impression, and an Off Peak indicator
if the Off Peak delivery service is selected. No other inscriptions are permitted in this zone.
Dimensions must be:

• 90mm across from the top right hand corner of the article
• 40mm down from the top edge of the article.
Colour of postage zone inscriptions
Any coloured ink can be used. Australia Post
prefers dark colours such as black, dark
blue and dark green.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Postage Paid Imprint
All articles that are not metered should bear a Postage Paid imprint.
The words POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA need to be printed in a rectangular
box within the following dimensions:
• maximum: 26 x 40mm (see illustration)
• minimum: 19 x 25mm.
Postage Meter Impression
A postage meter may be used as a payment method for the PreSort Letters
service.
The published price must be printed in the postage zone of each article. If a
date is included in the meter impression it must be the date of lodgement.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Off Peak indicator
All articles for which the Off Peak delivery service is selected should bear an Off Peak indicator,
located within the postage zone, to the left of the Postage Paid imprint or postage meter impression.
The words OFF PEAK need to be printed in capital letters, centred in a rectangular box with the
minimum dimensions of 25 x 19mm.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Personalised Imprints
Australia Post may approve a personalised imprint design for the Postage Paid Imprint or Combined Off Peak
indicator / Postage Paid imprint. The design must not have the appearance of a postage stamp and the words
POSTAGE PAID AUSTRALIA must be prominent (see example illustrations).
For approval please refer to the contact details for your state on the inside of the front cover.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Return address zone
An Australian return address is required to be shown on each article within
a lodgement. Either a street address or a post office box address is
acceptable.
Australia Post prefers return addresses to be:
• on the upper left-hand corner of the address side of the article
• no lower than 40mm from the top edge
• no larger than 8 point font preferred
• with no bolding.
Alternatively, the return address may be printed on the back of the article.
Return address details appearing in the postage zone as part of a postage
meter impression are acceptable. It is preferred that the return address be
prefixed with “If undeliverable, return to:” Variations to these requirements
should be submitted for approval.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing
requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Contains the barcode and address to which the article
is to be delivered.

Small and Small Plus articles
The complete barcode and delivery address must be
positioned in the barcode and delivery address zone
of the article:
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 no more than 100mm up from the bottom edge of
the article
 at least 10mm from the left and right edges of the
article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (landscape layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode
and delivery address are positioned in the barcode
and delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 15mm from the top and bottom edges
of the article
 at least 15mm from the left edge of the article
 at least 60mm from the right edge of the article
 outside of the postage zone.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Article layout and zones
Barcode and delivery address zone
Medium and Large articles (portrait layout)
Australia Post prefers that the complete barcode and
delivery address are positioned in the barcode and
delivery address zone of the article:
 at least 60mm from the top edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the bottom edge of the article
 at least 15mm from the left and right edges of the
article.

PreSort Letters basics
PreSort Letters requirements
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Delivery Address
Any font can be used for the delivery address as long as it is clearly readable, preferably in 12 point size, and it is
strongly recommended that print characters do not overlap. Whilst attributes such as italics, bolding, shadowing, or
underlining are permitted, their use should be avoided.

Dark colours such as black, dark blue and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be
used.

1

2

3

4
5

5 – Bottom line – Must contain the
the lines
state
abbreviation and
Additional
address
13locality,
––Address
(excluding
1
postcode.
Australia
Post
4the
– Second
last
line
– Must
contain
information
such
asmust
business
or
barcode
placement)
be aligned
2the
–
Barcode.
See
PreSort
Letters
requires
that
this
line
is
printed
number
and
name
of
the
street
person’s name, must be placed in
left.
Preparation
forLeave
barcode
requirements
CAPITALS.
onebox
or
or
thoroughfare
or lines
PO
or bag
above
the last
two
of two
the
spaces only
between
locality, the
number
address
and not
below,the
alongside
or
state
abbreviation
and
the
postcode.
within these two lines.
1. Any application for variations or additions to
this format should be submitted for approval
prior to lodgement

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Address and Barcode location
Address labels may be used but must be straight and firmly affixed.
If using window panel envelopes, the entire address block, including barcode, must be clearly visible through the
window panel when presented for lodgement.
The barcode can be placed separately from the delivery address, so long as it remains in the Barcode and
Delivery Address Zone.

Letter Category

Address and Barcode Location

Small or Small Plus

Must be parallel to the long side of the envelope.

Medium or large

Can be oriented to either portrait or landscape.
It is recommended that the address and barcode are oriented in the same
direction.
When using window panel envelopes, it is recommended that the barcode is
positioned below the address.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcoding
A barcode is a machine readable representation of information, usually printed as parallel lines, and improves the speed
and accuracy of processing mail.
The barcode used by Australia Post is called a 4-state barcode and includes a Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) which is
uniquely applied to Australian addresses.
Barcodes must conform to specified barcode requirements.
Dark colours such as black, dark blue, and dark green are preferred. Red, orange and yellow inks must not be used.
The following items are important elements for PreSort Letters articles:
• Obtaining the DPID
• Barcode clear zone
• Customer appended information in barcodes
• Unbarcoded PreSort Letters

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File (PAF), in which each
address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.
The DPID is an 8-digit number developed by Australia Post that enables each delivery point in Australia to be uniquely
identified.
You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct DPID for each
address. This DPID is then converted into a 4-state barcode and printed onto the article as a barcode which is read by
Australia Post’s mail processing machines.
A list of AMAS software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID – Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
The Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) is designed to improve the quality of addressing. AMAS is a
software approval program that provides a standard by which to test and measure the quality of address matching
software and its ability to correctly assign a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) to each address record.
To obtain AMAS approved software, a list of software vendors is available on the Australia Post website at
www.auspost.com.au/amas

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Obtaining the DPID - Barcode Quality Program
It is recommended that customers intending to lodge PreSort Letters for the first time should submit sample letters to
Australia Post for testing of barcode accuracy and readability.
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers to test the quality of
barcodes prior to the print production stage. Information relating to the Barcode Quality Program is available on the
Australia Post website at auspost.com.au/bqp.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Barcode clear zone
Barcodes require a clear zone that must be kept blank (free of printing or other distractions) immediately above, below,
and to the left and right of the barcode. This is to ensure that the barcode can be detected by the reader and processed
correctly.
There must be a clear zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and right and
at least 2mm from the top and bottom.
Non-address information, such as your
reference codes, sort plan number, etc, may be
located above the bottom two lines of the
address block provided the barcode clear zone
is observed. There is no requirement for this
information to be left aligned.
Logos, advertising content and other printing
may be added on the front and back of articles,
so long as the clear zone around the barcode
are observed.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Customer appended information in barcodes
The standard barcode contains 37 bars, however you have the opportunity to include your own information in 52 or
67 length 4-state barcodes. This information can be used to monitor mail returns for campaigns or orders. The
information is encoded and included in the additional bars. See Advanced: Barcoding module.

.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Unbarcoded articles
It is important to note that not all addresses may result in a barcode assignment. To reduce the incidence of multiple
lodgements from the same source data, there is the option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together
as a single lodgement using the same lodgement documentation.
It is a requirement of the service that all addresses within the lodgement are presented to current AMAS software and a
DPID assignment attempted. You may be requested to provide an Address Matching Processing Summary Report as
evidence.

There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded articles that may be included as part of a lodgement, provided that
the lodgement meets the minimum volume of 300 barcoded articles.
Identical addressing conditions apply for barcoded and unbarcoded articles in a lodgement.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Non compliance
Acceptance staff at the lodgement facility will perform an inspection to
determine if a lodgement satisfies the access conditions and barcodes are
valid.
If articles within a lodgement do not satisfy the PreSort Letters conditions, you
have the option of:
(a) withdrawing the lodgement, modifying and re-presenting it at a later date, or
(b) lodging the articles at either the full rate ordinary prices applicable at the
time, or Clean Mail if eligible.
Note: Off Peak lodgements that do not qualify for PreSort Letters prices, and
are lodged in an alternate service, will be despatched in accordance with the
delivery transport schedules of that service. Australia Post will do all it can to
ensure that the lodgement meets those transport schedules but this cannot be
guaranteed because of the OFF PEAK indicator on the articles.

PreSort Letters preparation
Barcodes and correct addressing requirements
Summary
Inscriptions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•
•

Postage meter impression or Postage Paid imprint
Off Peak indicator (if this service is chosen)
Return address
Delivery address including barcode

Correct addressing conditions for PreSort Letters articles are:
•
•
•

Address formatting
Address fonts
Address and Barcode Location

More information about barcodes and addressing can be found in these Advanced Modules: Correct Addressing and
Barcoding.

PreSort Letters preparation
Other considerations
How can I be sure an article is acceptable?
If you are concerned that your articles may not satisfy all service requirements you can request a preliminary test prior to
lodgement. Tests can be conducted on the following:
• shape
• window panel quality
• article colour, patterns or watermarks • paper stock quality
• plastic wrapping
• flexibility
• barcode readability
• positioning of logos, advertising and other printing.
Testing involves processing a sample of articles to determine if they are suitable for machine processing. Articles that
pass the test will be accepted at the relevant price, provided that all other requirements have been met.
Requests for testing should be directed to:
[email protected]

Australia Post
Business Letter Services
GPO BOX 1777
MELBOURNE VIC 3001

PreSort Letters preparation
PreSort Letters requirements
What will it cost?
Prices for PreSort Letters articles vary by size and weight category, the sort category, the destination state and the
delivery standard. Prices are available in the PreSort Letters service guide, the Post Charges Guide (MS11) and the
Australia Post website (auspost.com.au).
Articles attract Same State prices when lodged within the same state as the delivery address (as defined in the
Barcode Sort Plan).
For charging purposes, the ACT is considered to be part of NSW, and South Australia does not include Northern
Territory.
Australia Post provides a variety of payment options. For details, please discuss with your lodgement point or Account
Manager, or the PreSort Letters Coordination Team on 13 11 18.
Note: If you want to pay using an Australia Post charge account you will need to lodge at the office at which you hold
the account. Otherwise you will need to arrange with your account manager or Australia Post credit management for
your account to be made available at the selected lodgement office.

PreSort Letters preparation
Summary
The key points covered were:

• A number of characteristics apply to PreSort Letters envelopes, including colour, flexibility,
window panel requirements and plastic wrap.
• All PreSort Letter categories can be plastic wrapped.
• Plastic wrapped Small and Small Plus categories must be presented in Direct trays.
• Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the “Quiet Zone” around the barcode.
• The mandatory inscriptions on PreSort letters are the Postage Paid imprint, the return address,
the delivery address and the Off peak indicator if that service is chosen.
• Correct addressing conditions apply. Locality, state or territory abbreviation and Postcode in all
addresses is compulsory.
• You must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain the correct
DPID for each address, and print this on the article as a barcode.
• It is unlikely that you will be able to apply a barcode to all letters generated from a database. You
have an option to lodge barcoded and unbarcoded PreSort Letters together as a single lodgement
using the same lodgement documentation.

Assessment
You now need to complete a short assessment to check your
understanding of the information covered in this module.
This assessment consists of 10 multiple-choice questions and
should take you approximately 10 minutes to complete.
To pass the assessment, you need to answer at least eight of
these questions correctly.
Attempt this assessment as many times as you need to. If you
do not pass, it is recommended that you review this module
again.

Assessment
1

True or false?
A postage paid imprint or postage meter impression, a return address, and a delivery
address and, optionally an Off Peak indicator are mandatory inscriptions on a PreSort
Letters article.
a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
This statement is True. All three items are mandatory inscriptions on PreSort Letters
articles.

Assessment
2

Correct addressing conditions apply to all articles in a PreSort Letters lodgement.
Please select the incorrect statement from the list below.
a. Correct addressing conditions include the use of fonts and the format of the
address.
b. The complete address must be positioned in the address zone of the PreSort
Letters article
c. The barcode placement must be left justified

d. The second last line must contain the delivery address information.
e. It is recommended that the bottom line is printed in CAPITALS with no punctuation
and no underlining

Correct answer = C
The barcode is excluded from the requirement that address lines should be left justified.

Assessment
3

True or false?
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = A
Plastic wrapped letters are measured on the total plastic size, not on the size of the contents.

Assessment
4

Which categories of PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays?
a. Small
b. Small Plus

c. Medium
d. Large
e. Small and Small Plus
f.

Medium and Large

Correct answer = E
Small and Small Plus PreSort letters can be plastic wrapped provided they are in Direct Trays.

Assessment
5

True or false?
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed anywhere on the front and back
of PreSort Letters.

a. True
b. False

Correct answer = B
Logos, advertising content and other printing may be printed on the front and back of PreSort
Letters. This content must be kept clear of the ‘Quiet Zone’ around the barcode.

Assessment
6

Barcodes require a Quiet Zone free of printing. Where is this located?

a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.

Above and below the address zone
To the left and right of the address zone
Above and below the barcode
To the left and right of the barcode
Both a and b
Both c and d

Correct answer = F
There must be a Quiet zone (no printing) around the barcode of at least 6mm to the left and
right and at least 2mm from the top and bottom.

Assessment
7

In the Postal Address File (PAF), each address has a unique identifying number. What is this
abbreviated to?

a. The AMAS

b. The PAF
c. The RAAF
d. The DPID

Correct answer = D
Australia Post maintains a comprehensive database of addresses, the Postal Address File
(PAF), in which each address has a unique Delivery Point Identifier (DPID) number.

Assessment
8

What is the system which provides approval for address matching software called?

a. Address Matching Software System (AMSS)

b. Delivery Point Approval Process (DPAP)
c. Address Matching Approval System (AMAS)
d. Delivery Point Address Matching (DPAM)

Correct answer = C
Customers must use Address Matching Approval System (AMAS) certified software to obtain
the correct DPID for each address.

Assessment
9

Why does Australia Post provide the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both
customers and suppliers?

a. To ensure that correct addressing conditions are complied with.

b. To test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.
c. To provide a forum where barcode users can discuss the system.

Correct answer = B
Australia Post provides the Barcode Quality Program (BQP) to both customers and suppliers
to test the quality of barcodes prior to the print production stage.

Assessment
10

What percentage of a PreSort Letters lodgment is permitted to be unbarcoded?

a. 30%
b. 0% - all mail must be barcoded
c. 50%
d. As many as you like, so long as the minimum quantity of 300 barcoded letters
are lodged.

Correct answer = D
There is no restriction on the quantity of unbarcoded letters that may be included as part
of a PreSort Letters lodgement, provided that the lodgement meets the minimum volume
of 300 barcoded letters.